]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
sim: add --map-info option
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
9fbcbd81 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54 59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
951999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
96Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
cd6d6c15
NC
1026@item initfirst
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032objects.
1033
1034@item interpose
1035Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036but the primary executable.
1037
5fa222e4
AM
1038@item lazy
1039When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042Lazy binding is the default.
1043
cd6d6c15
NC
1044@item loadfltr
1045Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046runtime.
1047
1048@item muldefs
1049Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051@item nocombreloc
1052Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054@item nocopyreloc
1055Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057@item nodefaultlib
1058Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061@item nodelete
1062Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064@item nodlopen
1065Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067@item nodump
1068Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
6aa29e7b
JJ
1070@item noexecstack
1071Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073@item norelro
1074Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
cd6d6c15
NC
1076@item now
1077When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081first called.
1082
1083@item origin
1084Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
6aa29e7b
JJ
1086@item relro
1087Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
24718e3b
L
1089@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
cd6d6c15
NC
1095@end table
1096
ece2d90e 1097Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1098
1099@kindex -(
1100@cindex groups of archives
1101@item -( @var{archives} -)
1102@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1104either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1109archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1112they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113resolved.
1114
1115Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1116it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117more archives.
1118
69da35b5
NC
1119@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1124recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1125and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1126the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1127behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1130
4a43e768
AM
1131@kindex --as-needed
1132@kindex --no-as-needed
1133@item --as-needed
1134@itemx --no-as-needed
1135This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1136on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1137the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1139needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1144@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
e56f61be
L
1146@kindex --add-needed
1147@kindex --no-add-needed
1148@item --add-needed
1149@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1150These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1154
252b5132
RH
1155@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156@item -assert @var{keyword}
1157This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159@kindex -Bdynamic
1160@kindex -dy
1161@kindex -call_shared
1162@item -Bdynamic
1163@itemx -dy
1164@itemx -call_shared
1165Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1166for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1167default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1168for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1169multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1170@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1171
a1ab1d2a
UD
1172@kindex -Bgroup
1173@item -Bgroup
1174Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1177@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1178only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1179
252b5132
RH
1180@kindex -Bstatic
1181@kindex -dn
1182@kindex -non_shared
1183@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1184@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1185@itemx -dn
1186@itemx -non_shared
1187@itemx -static
1188Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1189platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1190variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1191may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1192library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1193option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1194option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1195shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1197libraries.
252b5132
RH
1198
1199@kindex -Bsymbolic
1200@item -Bsymbolic
1201When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1203for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
40b36307
L
1207@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1210symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1211This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212libraries.
1213
55255dae
L
1214@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1217typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222which support shared libraries.
1223
1224The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
40b36307
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228@item --dynamic-list-data
1229Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1234is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
0b8a70d9
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
252b5132
RH
1240@kindex --check-sections
1241@kindex --no-check-sections
1242@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1243@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1244Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1245been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1246perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1248allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1249restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1250Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1251force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252option.
252b5132 1253
ddbb8a31
NC
1254@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1259by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1265behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271required by the output binary. With
1272@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
252b5132
RH
1403@cindex help
1404@cindex usage
1405@kindex --help
1406@item --help
1407Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
ea20a7da
CC
1409@kindex --target-help
1410@item --target-help
1411Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
2509a395
SL
1413@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1415Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1416@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1417
1418@cindex memory usage
1419@kindex --no-keep-memory
1420@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1421@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1423instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1424necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1425while linking a large executable.
1426
1427@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1428@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1429@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1430@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1431Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1432is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1435libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1436
aa713662
L
1437@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438@kindex -z muldefs
1439@item --allow-multiple-definition
1440@itemx -z muldefs
1441Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443first definition will be used.
1444
b79e8c78 1445@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1446@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1447@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1448@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1449Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1450This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1453how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
903249d7
NC
1455The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458a shared library.
1459
1460The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463@itemize @bullet
1464@item
1465A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467resolvable at load time.
1468@item
1469There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475appropriate memset function.
1476@end itemize
b79e8c78 1477
31941635
L
1478@kindex --no-undefined-version
1479@item --no-undefined-version
1480Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482will be issued instead.
1483
3e3b46e5
PB
1484@kindex --default-symver
1485@item --default-symver
1486Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1487exported symbols.
1488
1489@kindex --default-imported-symver
1490@item --default-imported-symver
1491Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1493
252b5132
RH
1494@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1496Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1497files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1499This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1500errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502inappropriate.
1503
fe7929ce
AM
1504@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex --no-whole-archive
1510@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1511Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1512archive files.
1513
1514@cindex output file after errors
1515@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516@item --noinhibit-exec
1517Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
0a9c1c8e
CD
1522@kindex -nostdlib
1523@item -nostdlib
1524Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
252b5132 1528@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1529@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1531@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1533@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1534object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1536should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1539list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1540command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1542@end ifclear
1543
36af4a4e
JJ
1544@kindex -pie
1545@kindex --pic-executable
1546@item -pie
1547@itemx --pic-executable
1548@cindex position independent executables
1549Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1550ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1552address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1553normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
252b5132
RH
1556@kindex -qmagic
1557@item -qmagic
1558This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560@kindex -Qy
1561@item -Qy
1562This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564@kindex --relax
1565@cindex synthesizing linker
1566@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1567@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1568@item --relax
28d5f677 1569@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1570An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1571@ifset GENERIC
1572This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1575@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1576@end ifset
1577@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1578@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1579@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1580@ifset XTENSA
1581@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1583@ifset M68HC11
1584@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1586@ifset POWERPC
1587@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588@end ifset
252b5132 1589
28d5f677
NC
1590On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1595
1596On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1599This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1601@end ifset
1602
1603@ifset GENERIC
1604On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605but ignored.
1606@end ifset
1607
28d5f677
NC
1608On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@cindex retaining specified symbols
1612@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1614@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1616Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1619@ifset GENERIC
1620(such as VxWorks)
1621@end ifset
1622where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623run-time memory.
1624
1625@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1632@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1633@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1634@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1635Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1636linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1637arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1638them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1639also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1641@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1642ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
ff5dcc92 1645The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1646SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1647@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1650gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1651file systems.
252b5132 1652
ff5dcc92 1653For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1654followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1655the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1660@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1662When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1663happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664of the input files.
1665
1666When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1669explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1670specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1671@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1672either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673appearing multiple times.
1674
28c309a2
NC
1675This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678runtime linker would do.
1679
252b5132 1680The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1681libraries:
252b5132
RH
1682@enumerate
1683@item
ff5dcc92 1684Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1685@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1686Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1687between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1690at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1693@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1694On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1697@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1698On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1703@item
ec4eb78a
L
1704For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708@item
252b5132
RH
1709The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710@item
1711For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713@end enumerate
1714
1715If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716warning and continue with the link.
1717@end ifset
1718
1719@kindex -shared
1720@kindex -Bshareable
1721@item -shared
1722@itemx -Bshareable
1723@cindex shared libraries
1724Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1726shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1727undefined symbols in the link.
1728
252b5132 1729@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1730@item --sort-common
1731@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1733This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1738specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1739
2509a395
SL
1740@kindex --sort-section=name
1741@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1742This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743patterns in the linker script.
1744
2509a395
SL
1745@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1747This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748patterns in the linker script.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1751@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1752Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1753each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1754size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1755
1756@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1757@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1758Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1759output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1760This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1761certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1763that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1765input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1767many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1768
1769@kindex --stats
1770@item --stats
1771Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772as execution time and memory usage.
1773
2509a395 1774@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1775@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1778that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
252b5132
RH
1780@kindex --traditional-format
1781@cindex traditional format
1782@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1783For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1785use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1788For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1789symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1792trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1793combine duplicate entries.
1794
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1797Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1799times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800line.
1801@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1804should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1810@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1811@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1815@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1816
2509a395
SL
1817@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1819@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
560e09e9
NC
1823@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1826values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828@table @samp
1829@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1830Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1831
1832@item report-all
da8bce14 1833Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1834
1835@item ignore-in-object-files
1836Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1842when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844command line.
1845@end table
1846
1847The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852can change this to a warning.
1853
252b5132
RH
1854@kindex --verbose
1855@cindex verbose
1856@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1857@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1858Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1859supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1860the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1861
1862@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1863@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1864@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1865Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1866used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1867about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1868is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1869see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1870use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1871symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1872@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1873
7ce691ae 1874@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1875@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1876@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1877@item --warn-common
1878Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1879a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1880but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1881you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1882Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1883warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1884
1885There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1886
1887@table @samp
1888@item int i = 1;
1889A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1890file.
1891
1892@item extern int i;
1893An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1894There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1895variable somewhere.
1896
1897@item int i;
1898A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1899variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1900The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1901single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1902size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1903a definition of the same variable.
1904@end table
1905
1906The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1907Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1908just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1909encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1910a common symbol.
1911
1912@enumerate
1913@item
1914Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1915definition for the symbol.
1916@smallexample
1917@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1918 overridden by definition
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1920@end smallexample
1921
1922@item
1923Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1924the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1925except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1926@smallexample
1927@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1928 overriding common
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1930@end smallexample
1931
1932@item
1933Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1934@smallexample
1935@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1936 of `@var{symbol}'
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1938@end smallexample
1939
1940@item
1941Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1942@smallexample
1943@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1944 overridden by larger common
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1946@end smallexample
1947
1948@item
1949Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1950the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1951encountered in a different order.
1952@smallexample
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overriding smaller common
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1956@end smallexample
1957@end enumerate
1958
1959@kindex --warn-constructors
1960@item --warn-constructors
1961Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1962object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1963detect the use of global constructors.
1964
1965@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1966@item --warn-multiple-gp
1967Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1968This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1969Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1970section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1971of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1972base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1973base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1974bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1975large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1976values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1977option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1978
1979@kindex --warn-once
1980@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1981@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1982@item --warn-once
1983Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1984which refers to it.
1985
1986@kindex --warn-section-align
1987@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1988@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1989@item --warn-section-align
1990Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1991alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1992The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1993is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1994the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1995
8fdd7217
NC
1996@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1997@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1998Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1999
a0c402a5
L
2000@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2001@item --warn-alternate-em
2002Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2003
560e09e9
NC
2004@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2005@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2007@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2008This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2009
2010@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2011@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2012This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2013it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2014
252b5132
RH
2015@kindex --whole-archive
2016@cindex including an entire archive
2017@item --whole-archive
2018For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2019@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2020in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2021files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2022library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2023library. This option may be used more than once.
2024
7ec229ce 2025Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2026about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2027Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2028list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2029your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2030
2509a395
SL
2031@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2032@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2033Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2034@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2035undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2036@var{symbol}.
2037
2038This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2039wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2040wishes to call the system function, it should call
2041@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2042
2043Here is a trivial example:
2044
2045@smallexample
2046void *
cc2f008e 2047__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2048@{
cc2f008e 2049 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2050 return __real_malloc (c);
2051@}
2052@end smallexample
2053
ff5dcc92 2054If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2055all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2056instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2057call the real @code{malloc} function.
2058
2059You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2060links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2061you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2062file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2063call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2064
6aa29e7b
JJ
2065@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2066@item --eh-frame-hdr
2067Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2068@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2069
6c1439be
L
2070@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2071@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2072@item --enable-new-dtags
2073@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2074This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2075systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2076@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2077If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2078created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2079those options are only available for ELF systems.
2080
2d643429 2081@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2082@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2083Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2084close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2085time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2086increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2087value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2088
fdc90cb4
JJ
2089@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2090@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2091Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2092@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2093new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2094the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2095hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2096
35835446
JR
2097@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2098@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2099This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2100linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2101for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2102about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2103
4f9c04f7 2104Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21051021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2106run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2107has been used.
2108
2109The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2110enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2111
c0065db7
RM
2112@kindex --build-id
2113@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2114@item --build-id
2115@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2116Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2117The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2118file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2119@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2120parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2121@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2122@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2123an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2124characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2125omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2126
2127The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2128that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2129unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2130to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2131file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2132string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2133
2134Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2135@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2136@end table
2137
0285c67d
NC
2138@c man end
2139
36f63dca 2140@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2141
0285c67d
NC
2142@c man begin OPTIONS
2143
ff5dcc92 2144The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2145the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2146normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2147use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2148@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2149like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2150symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2151object file).
2152
2153In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2154support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2155PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2156values by either a space or an equals sign.
2157
ff5dcc92 2158@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2159
2160@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2161@item --add-stdcall-alias
2162If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2163as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2164[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2165
2166@kindex --base-file
2167@item --base-file @var{file}
2168Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2169addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2170@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2171[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2172
2173@kindex --dll
2174@item --dll
2175Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2176@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2177file.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2179
88183869
DK
2180@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2181@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2182@item --enable-long-section-names
2183@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2184The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2185the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2186for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2187fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2188to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2189allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2190disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2191generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2192as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2193with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2194GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2195information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2196option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2197section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2198when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2199image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2200[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2201
252b5132
RH
2202@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2203@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2204@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2207do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2208only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2209resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2210undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2211@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2212to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2213warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2214import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2215to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2216feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2217@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2218mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2220
522f09cd
KT
2221@kindex --leading-underscore
2222@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2223@item --leading-underscore
2224@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2225For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2226in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2227disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2228
252b5132
RH
2229@cindex DLLs, creating
2230@kindex --export-all-symbols
2231@item --export-all-symbols
2232If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2233be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2234otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2235explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2236attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2237option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2238@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2239@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2240exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2241re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2242such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2243@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2244@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2245Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2246not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2247extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2248(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2249These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2250@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2251@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2252@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2253@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2254[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2255
2256@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2257@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2258Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2259exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2260[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2261
2927aaca
NC
2262@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2263@item --exclude-all-symbols
2264Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2265[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2266
252b5132
RH
2267@kindex --file-alignment
2268@item --file-alignment
2269Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2270file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2271512.
bb10df36 2272[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2273
2274@cindex heap size
2275@kindex --heap
2276@item --heap @var{reserve}
2277@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2278Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2279to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2280committed.
bb10df36 2281[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2282
2283@cindex image base
2284@kindex --image-base
2285@item --image-base @var{value}
2286Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2287the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2288is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2289your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2290other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2291for dlls.
bb10df36 2292[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2293
2294@kindex --kill-at
2295@item --kill-at
2296If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2297symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2298[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2299
26d2d8a2
BF
2300@kindex --large-address-aware
2301@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2302If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2303header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2304greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2305or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2306section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2307[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2308
252b5132
RH
2309@kindex --major-image-version
2310@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2311Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2313
2314@kindex --major-os-version
2315@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2316Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2318
2319@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2320@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2321Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2322[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2323
2324@kindex --minor-image-version
2325@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2326Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2327[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2328
2329@kindex --minor-os-version
2330@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2331Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2332[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2333
2334@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2335@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2336Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2337[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2338
2339@cindex DEF files, creating
2340@cindex DLLs, creating
2341@kindex --output-def
2342@item --output-def @var{file}
2343The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2344file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2345(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2346library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2347automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2348[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2349
b044cda1
CW
2350@cindex DLLs, creating
2351@kindex --out-implib
2352@item --out-implib @var{file}
2353The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2354import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2355import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2356may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2357makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2358creation step.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2360
2361@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2362@item --enable-auto-image-base
2363Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2364using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2365from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2366collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2367avoided.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2369
2370@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2371@item --disable-auto-image-base
2372Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2373user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2374default.
bb10df36 2375[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2376
2377@cindex DLLs, linking to
2378@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2379@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2380When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2381search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2382@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2383between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2384uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2385@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2386[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2387
2388@kindex --enable-auto-import
2389@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2390Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2391DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2392building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2393'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2394to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2395specification published by Microsoft.
2396
e2a83dd0
NC
2397Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2398data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2399placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2400around a problem with consts that is described here:
2401http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2402
4d8907ac
DS
2403Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2404see this message:
0d888aac 2405
ece2d90e 2406"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2407documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2408
ece2d90e
NC
2409This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2410ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2411allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2412fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2413constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2414multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2415this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2416of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2417the warning, and exit.
2418
2419There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2420data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2421
2fa9fc65
NC
2422One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2423of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2424this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2425
c0065db7
RM
2426A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2427that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2428there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2429a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2430
2431@example
2432extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2433extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2434 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2435@end example
2436
2437or
2438
2439@example
2440extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2441extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2442 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2443@end example
2444
c0065db7 2445For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2446is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2447
2448@example
2449extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2450extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2451 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2452@end example
2453
c406afaf
NC
2454or
2455
2456@example
2457extern long long extern_ll;
2458extern_ll -->
2459 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2460@end example
2461
2fa9fc65 2462A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2463'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2464@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2465requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2466building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2467merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2468between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2469constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2470
2471Original:
2472@example
2473--foo.h
2474extern int arr[];
2475--foo.c
2476#include "foo.h"
2477void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2478 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2479@}
2480@end example
2481
2482Solution 1:
2483@example
2484--foo.h
2485extern int arr[];
2486--foo.c
2487#include "foo.h"
2488void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2489 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2490 volatile int *parr = arr;
2491 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2492@}
2493@end example
2494
2495Solution 2:
2496@example
2497--foo.h
2498/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2499#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2500 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2501#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2502#else
2503#define FOO_IMPORT
2504#endif
2505extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2506--foo.c
2507#include "foo.h"
2508void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2509 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2510@}
2511@end example
2512
c0065db7 2513A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2514library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2515for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2516functions).
bb10df36 2517[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2518
2519@kindex --disable-auto-import
2520@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2521Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2522@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2523[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2524
2fa9fc65
NC
2525@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2526@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2528that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2529a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2530environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2532
2533@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2534@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2536DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2537[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2538
b044cda1
CW
2539@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2540@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2542[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2543
252b5132
RH
2544@kindex --section-alignment
2545@item --section-alignment
2546Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2547addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2548[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2549
2550@cindex stack size
2551@kindex --stack
2552@item --stack @var{reserve}
2553@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2554Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2555to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2556committed.
bb10df36 2557[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2558
2559@kindex --subsystem
2560@item --subsystem @var{which}
2561@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2563Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2564legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2565@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2566the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2567@var{which}.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2569
2f563b51
DK
2570The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2571of the PE file header:
2572[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2573
2574@kindex --dynamicbase
2575@item --dynamicbase
2576The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2577randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2578Vista for i386 PE targets.
2579
2580@kindex --forceinteg
2581@item --forceinteg
2582Code integrity checks are enforced.
2583
2584@kindex --nxcompat
2585@item --nxcompat
2586The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2587This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2588
2589@kindex --no-isolation
2590@item --no-isolation
2591Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2592
2593@kindex --no-seh
2594@item --no-seh
2595The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2596this image.
2597
2598@kindex --no-bind
2599@item --no-bind
2600Do not bind this image.
2601
2602@kindex --wdmdriver
2603@item --wdmdriver
2604The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2605
2606@kindex --tsaware
2607@item --tsaware
2608The image is Terminal Server aware.
2609
252b5132
RH
2610@end table
2611
0285c67d
NC
2612@c man end
2613
93fd0973
SC
2614@ifset M68HC11
2615@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2616
2617@c man begin OPTIONS
2618
2619The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2620memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2621
2622@table @gcctabopt
2623
2624@kindex --no-trampoline
2625@item --no-trampoline
2626This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2627is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2628instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2629
2630@kindex --bank-window
2631@item --bank-window @var{name}
2632This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2633the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2634The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2635paging and addresses within the memory window.
2636
2637@end table
2638
2639@c man end
2640@end ifset
2641
7fb9f789
NC
2642@ifset M68K
2643@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2644
2645@c man begin OPTIONS
2646
2647The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2648when linking for 68K targets.
2649
2650@table @gcctabopt
2651
2652@kindex --got
2653@item --got=@var{type}
2654This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2655@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2656@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2657Info entry for @file{ld}.
2658
2659@end table
2660
2661@c man end
2662@end ifset
2663
252b5132
RH
2664@ifset UsesEnvVars
2665@node Environment
2666@section Environment Variables
2667
0285c67d
NC
2668@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2669
560e09e9 2670You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2671@ifclear SingleFormat
2672@code{GNUTARGET},
2673@end ifclear
2674@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2675
36f63dca 2676@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2677@kindex GNUTARGET
2678@cindex default input format
2679@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2680use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2681of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2682@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2683of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2684attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2685this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2686there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2687object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2688BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2689in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2690@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex LDEMULATION
2693@cindex default emulation
2694@cindex emulation, default
2695@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2696@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2697behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2698available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2699the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2700variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2701linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2702
2703@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2704@cindex demangling, default
2705Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2706@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2707default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2708a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2709may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2710options.
2711
0285c67d
NC
2712@c man end
2713@end ifset
2714
252b5132
RH
2715@node Scripts
2716@chapter Linker Scripts
2717
2718@cindex scripts
2719@cindex linker scripts
2720@cindex command files
2721Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2722written in the linker command language.
2723
2724The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2725the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2726the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2727more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2728direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2729described below.
2730
2731The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2732yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2733linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2734to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2735such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2736
2737You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2738line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2739default linker script.
2740
2741You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2742to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2743Linker Scripts}.
2744
2745@menu
2746* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2747* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2748* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2749* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2750* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2751* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2752* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2753* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2754* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2755* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2756* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2757@end menu
2758
2759@node Basic Script Concepts
2760@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2761@cindex linker script concepts
2762We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2763describe the linker script language.
2764
2765The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2766file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2767@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2768The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2769purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2770among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2771section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2772in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2773
2774Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2775also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2776contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2777the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2778A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2779area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2780loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2781which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2782of debugging information.
2783
2784Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2785first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2786the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2787@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2788section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2789same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2790is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2791(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2792based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2793RAM address would be the VMA.
2794
2795You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2796program with the @samp{-h} option.
2797
2798Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2799@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2800has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2801information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2802will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2803static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2804referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2805
2806You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2807program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2808option.
2809
2810@node Script Format
2811@section Linker Script Format
2812@cindex linker script format
2813Linker scripts are text files.
2814
2815You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2816either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2817symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2818generally ignored.
2819
2820Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2821If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2822otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2823double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2824file name.
2825
2826You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2827@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2828to whitespace.
2829
2830@node Simple Example
2831@section Simple Linker Script Example
2832@cindex linker script example
2833@cindex example of linker script
2834Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2835
2836The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2837@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2838memory layout of the output file.
2839
2840The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2841describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2842code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2843@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2844Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2845your input files.
2846
2847For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28480x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2849linker script which will do that:
2850@smallexample
2851SECTIONS
2852@{
2853 . = 0x10000;
2854 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2855 . = 0x8000000;
2856 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2857 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2858@}
2859@end smallexample
2860
2861You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2862followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2863descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2864
252b5132
RH
2865The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2866sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2867counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2868other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2869current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2870incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2871@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2872
2873The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2874required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2875after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2876which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2877wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2878means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2879
2880Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2881@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2882@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2883
2884The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2885the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2886at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2887output section, the value of the location counter will be
2888@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2889effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2890immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2891
2892The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2893alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2894example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2895sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2896may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2897sections.
2898
2899That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2900
2901@node Simple Commands
2902@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2903@cindex linker script simple commands
2904In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2905
2906@menu
2907* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2908* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2909@ifclear SingleFormat
2910* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2911@end ifclear
2912
4a93e180 2913* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2914* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2915@end menu
2916
2917@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2918@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2919@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2920@cindex start of execution
2921@cindex first instruction
2922@cindex entry point
2923The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2924point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2925entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2926@smallexample
2927ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2928@end smallexample
2929
2930There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2931entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2932stopping when one of them succeeds:
2933@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2934@item
252b5132 2935the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2936@item
252b5132 2937the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2938@item
3ab904c4
NC
2939the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2940targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2941check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2942@item
252b5132 2943the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2944@item
252b5132
RH
2945The address @code{0}.
2946@end itemize
2947
2948@node File Commands
36f63dca 2949@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2950@cindex linker script file commands
2951Several linker script commands deal with files.
2952
2953@table @code
2954@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2955@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@cindex including a linker script
2957Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2958be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2959with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
296010 levels deep.
2961
4006703d
NS
2962You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2963@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2964
252b5132
RH
2965@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2966@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2967@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2968@cindex input files in linker scripts
2969@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2970@cindex linker script input object files
2971The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2972in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2973
2974For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2975a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2976then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2977
2978In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2979script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2980
e3f2db7f
AO
2981In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2982with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2983located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2984for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2985open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2986linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2987description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2988
ff5dcc92 2989If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2990name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2991@samp{-l}.
2992
2993When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2994files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2995script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2996
2997@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2998@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2999@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3000@cindex grouping input files
3001The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3002files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3003new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3004in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3005
b717d30e
JJ
3006@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3007@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3008@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3009This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3010commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3011as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3012with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3013when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3014@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3015and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3016setting afterwards.
3017
252b5132
RH
3018@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3019@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3020@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3021The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3022@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3023@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3024Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3025precedence.
3026
3027You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3028output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3029
3030@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3031@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@cindex library search path in linker script
3033@cindex archive search path in linker script
3034@cindex search path in linker script
3035The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3036@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3037@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3038on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3039are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3040the command line option are searched first.
3041
3042@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3043@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@cindex first input file
3045The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3046that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3047though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3048when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3049first file.
3050@end table
3051
3052@ifclear SingleFormat
3053@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3054@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3055A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3056
3057@table @code
3058@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3059@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3060@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3061@cindex output file format in linker script
3062The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3063output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3064exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3065(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3066line option takes precedence.
3067
3068You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3069formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3070This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3071desired endianness.
3072
3073If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3074will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3075output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3076used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3077
3078For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3079command:
3080@smallexample
3081OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3082@end smallexample
3083This says that the default format for the output file is
3084@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3085option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3086format.
3087
3088@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3089@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@cindex input file format in linker script
3091The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3092files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3093This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3094(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3095is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3096command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3097@end table
3098@end ifclear
3099
4a93e180
NC
3100@node REGION_ALIAS
3101@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3102@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3103@cindex region alias
3104@cindex region names
3105
3106Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3107@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3108
3109@smallexample
3110REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3111@end smallexample
3112
3113The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3114memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3115to memory regions. An example follows.
3116
3117Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3118memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3119that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3120non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3121access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3122read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3123sections:
3124
3125@itemize @bullet
3126@item
3127@code{.text} program code;
3128@item
3129@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3130@item
3131@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3132@item
3133@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3134@end itemize
3135
3136The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3137part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3138output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3139systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3140@code{C}:
3141@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3142@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3143@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3144@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3145@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3146@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3147@end multitable
3148The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3149loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3150the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3151the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3152
3153The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3154includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3155memory layout:
3156@smallexample
3157INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3158
3159SECTIONS
3160 @{
3161 .text :
3162 @{
3163 *(.text)
3164 @} > REGION_TEXT
3165 .rodata :
3166 @{
3167 *(.rodata)
3168 rodata_end = .;
3169 @} > REGION_RODATA
3170 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3171 @{
3172 data_start = .;
3173 *(.data)
3174 @} > REGION_DATA
3175 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3176 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3177 .bss :
3178 @{
3179 *(.bss)
3180 @} > REGION_BSS
3181 @}
3182@end smallexample
3183
3184Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3185regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3186variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3187@table @code
3188@item A
3189Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3190@smallexample
3191MEMORY
3192 @{
3193 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3194 @}
3195
3196REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3200@end smallexample
3201@item B
3202Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3203into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3204@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3205@smallexample
3206MEMORY
3207 @{
3208 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3209 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3210 @}
3211
3212REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3216@end smallexample
3217@item C
3218Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3219@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3220initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3221system start into the @code{RAM}.
3222@smallexample
3223MEMORY
3224 @{
3225 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3226 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3227 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 @}
3229
3230REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3234@end smallexample
3235@end table
3236
3237It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3238@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3239necessary:
3240@smallexample
3241#include <string.h>
3242
3243extern char data_start [];
3244extern char data_size [];
3245extern char data_load_start [];
3246
3247void copy_data(void)
3248@{
3249 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3250 @{
3251 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3252 @}
3253@}
3254@end smallexample
3255
252b5132 3256@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3257@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3258There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3259
3260@table @code
3261@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3262@kindex ASSERT
3263@cindex assertion in linker script
3264Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3265with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3266
3267@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3268@kindex EXTERN
3269@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3270Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3271symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3272modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3273each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3274command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3275
3276@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3277@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@cindex common allocation in linker script
3279This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3280to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3281output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3282
4818e05f
AM
3283@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3284@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@cindex common allocation in linker script
3286This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3287command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3288to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3289
53d25da6
AM
3290@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3291@kindex INSERT
3292@cindex insert user script into default script
3293This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3294augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3295inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3296@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3297default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3298sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3299linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3300insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3301linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3302default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3303of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3304to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3305is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3306
3307@smallexample
3308SECTIONS
3309@{
3310 OVERLAY :
3311 @{
3312 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3313 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3314 @}
3315@}
3316INSERT AFTER .text;
3317@end smallexample
3318
252b5132
RH
3319@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3320@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3321@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3322This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3323references among certain output sections.
3324
3325In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3326using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3327will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3328errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3329a function defined in the other section.
3330
3331The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3332@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3333an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3334@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3335names.
3336
3337@ifclear SingleFormat
3338@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3339@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@cindex machine architecture
3341@cindex architecture
3342Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3343of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3344architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3345the @samp{-f} option.
3346@end ifclear
3347@end table
3348
3349@node Assignments
3350@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3351@cindex assignment in scripts
3352@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3353@cindex variables, defining
3354You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3355the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3356
3357@menu
3358* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3359* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3360* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3361* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3362@end menu
3363
3364@node Simple Assignments
3365@subsection Simple Assignments
3366
3367You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3368
3369@table @code
3370@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3371@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3372@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3373@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3374@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3375@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3376@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3377@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3378@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3379@end table
3380
3381The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3382@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3383defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3384
3385The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3386may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3387
3388The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3389
3390Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3391
3392You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3393statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3394section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3395
3396The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3397expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3398
3399Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3400assignments may be used:
3401
3402@smallexample
3403floating_point = 0;
3404SECTIONS
3405@{
3406 .text :
3407 @{
3408 *(.text)
3409 _etext = .;
3410 @}
156e34dd 3411 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3412 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3413@}
3414@end smallexample
3415@noindent
3416In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3417zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3418the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3419defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3420upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3421
3422@node PROVIDE
3423@subsection PROVIDE
3424@cindex PROVIDE
3425In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3426only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3427the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3428@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3429@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3430@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3431@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3432@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3433
3434Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3435@smallexample
3436SECTIONS
3437@{
3438 .text :
3439 @{
3440 *(.text)
3441 _etext = .;
3442 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3443 @}
3444@}
3445@end smallexample
3446
3447In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3448underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3449the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3450underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3451If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3452linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3453
7af8e998
L
3454@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3455@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3456@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3457Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3458hidden and won't be exported.
3459
73ae6183
NC
3460@node Source Code Reference
3461@subsection Source Code Reference
3462
3463Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3464intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3465a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3466symbol that does not have a value.
3467
3468Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3469transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3470stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3471prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3472mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3473of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3474variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3475linker script variable might be referred to as:
3476
3477@smallexample
3478 extern int foo;
3479@end smallexample
3480
3481But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3482
3483@smallexample
3484 _foo = 1000;
3485@end smallexample
3486
3487In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3488transformation has taken place.
3489
3490When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3491things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3492in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3493second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3494table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3495contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3496value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3497
3498@smallexample
3499 int foo = 1000;
3500@end smallexample
3501
3502creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3503holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3504number 1000 is initially stored.
3505
3506When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3507first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3508memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3509So:
3510
3511@smallexample
3512 foo = 1;
3513@end smallexample
3514
3515looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3516associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3517address. Whereas:
3518
3519@smallexample
3520 int * a = & foo;
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3524and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3525the variable @samp{a}.
3526
3527Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3528the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3529an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3530
3531@smallexample
3532 foo = 1000;
3533@end smallexample
3534
3535creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3536the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3537address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3538linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3539access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3540
3541Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3542you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3543use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3544section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3545linker script contains these declarations:
3546
3547@smallexample
3548@group
3549 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3550 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3551 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3552@end group
3553@end smallexample
3554
3555Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3556
3557@smallexample
3558@group
3559 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3560
73ae6183
NC
3561 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3562@end group
3563@end smallexample
3564
3565Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3566
252b5132 3567@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3568@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3569@kindex SECTIONS
3570The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3571into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3572
3573The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3574@smallexample
3575SECTIONS
3576@{
3577 @var{sections-command}
3578 @var{sections-command}
3579 @dots{}
3580@}
3581@end smallexample
3582
3583Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3584
3585@itemize @bullet
3586@item
3587an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3588@item
3589a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3590@item
3591an output section description
3592@item
3593an overlay description
3594@end itemize
3595
3596The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3597@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3598those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3599understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3600the layout of the output file.
3601
3602Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3603below.
3604
3605If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3606linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3607section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3608input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3609example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3610in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3611
3612@menu
3613* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3614* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3615* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3616* Input Section:: Input section description
3617* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3618* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3619* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3620* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3621* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3622@end menu
3623
3624@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3625@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3626The full description of an output section looks like this:
3627@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3628@group
7e7d5768 3629@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3630 [AT(@var{lma})]
3631 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3632 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3633 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3634 @{
3635 @var{output-section-command}
3636 @var{output-section-command}
3637 @dots{}
562d3460 3638 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3639@end group
3640@end smallexample
3641
3642Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3643
3644The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3645name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3646The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3647
3648Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3649
3650@itemize @bullet
3651@item
3652a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3653@item
3654an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3655@item
3656data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3657@item
3658a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3659@end itemize
3660
3661@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3662@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3663@cindex name, section
3664@cindex section name
3665The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3666meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3667support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3668must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3669example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3670output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3671names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3672quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3673characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3674commas must be quoted.
3675
3676The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3677Discarding}.
3678
3679@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3680@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3681@cindex address, section
3682@cindex section address
3683The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3684address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3685is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3686
3687If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3688section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3689to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3690alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3691contained within the output section.
3692
3693The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3694
3695@itemize @bullet
3696@item
3697If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3698is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3699in that region.
3700
3701@item
3702If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3703regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3704section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3705be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3706
3707@item
3708If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3709the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3710counter.
3711@end itemize
3712
3713@noindent
3714For example:
3715
252b5132
RH
3716@smallexample
3717.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3718@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3719
252b5132
RH
3720@noindent
3721and
ea5cae92 3722
252b5132
RH
3723@smallexample
3724.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3725@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3726
252b5132
RH
3727@noindent
3728are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3729@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3730counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3731counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3732input sections.
252b5132
RH
3733
3734The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3735For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3736so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3737do something like this:
3738@smallexample
3739.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3740@end smallexample
3741@noindent
3742This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3743aligned upward to the specified value.
3744
3745Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3746location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3747sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3748
3749@node Input Section
36f63dca 3750@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3751@cindex input sections
3752@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3753The most common output section command is an input section description.
3754
3755The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3756You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3757in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3758map the input files into your memory layout.
3759
3760@menu
3761* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3762* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3763* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3764* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3765* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3766@end menu
3767
3768@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3769@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3770@cindex input section basics
3771An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3772by a list of section names in parentheses.
3773
3774The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3775describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3776
3777The most common input section description is to include all input
3778sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3779include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3780@smallexample
3781*(.text)
3782@end smallexample
3783@noindent
18625d54
CM
3784Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3785of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3786match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3787example:
252b5132 3788@smallexample
b4346c09 3789*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3790@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3791will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3792@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3793
3794There are two ways to include more than one section:
3795@smallexample
3796*(.text .rdata)
3797*(.text) *(.rdata)
3798@end smallexample
3799@noindent
3800The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3801@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3802first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3803they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3804@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3805@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3806
3807You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3808You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3809needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3810@smallexample
3811data.o(.data)
3812@end smallexample
3813
967928e9
AM
3814You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3815matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3816with no whitespace around the colon.
3817
3818@table @samp
3819@item archive:file
3820matches file within archive
3821@item archive:
3822matches the whole archive
3823@item :file
3824matches file but not one in an archive
3825@end table
3826
3827Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3828wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3829single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3830@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3831within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3832also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3833other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3834from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3835command.
3836
252b5132
RH
3837If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3838the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3839commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3840@smallexample
3841data.o
3842@end smallexample
3843
967928e9
AM
3844When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3845and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3846characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3847name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3848did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3849though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3850@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3851the archive search path.
3852
3853@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3854@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3855@cindex input section wildcards
3856@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3857@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3858@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3859In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3860name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3861
3862The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3863pattern for the file name.
3864
3865The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3866
3867@table @samp
3868@item *
3869matches any number of characters
3870@item ?
3871matches any single character
3872@item [@var{chars}]
3873matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3874character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3875@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3876@item \
3877quotes the following character
3878@end table
3879
3880When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3881will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3882Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3883exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3884@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3885a @samp{/} character.
3886
3887File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3888specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3889does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3890
3891If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3892appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3893will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3894sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3895@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3896@smallexample
3897.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3898.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3899@end smallexample
3900
bcaa7b3e 3901@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3902Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3903in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3904this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3905pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3906@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3907into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3908
bcaa7b3e
L
3909@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3910@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3911difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3912ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3913
3914@cindex SORT
3915@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3916
3917When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3918can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3919
3920@enumerate
3921@item
3922@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3923It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3924sections have the same name.
3925@item
3926@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3927It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3928sections have the same alignment.
3929@item
c0065db7 3930@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3931treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3932@item
3933@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3934is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3935@item
3936All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3937@end enumerate
3938
3939When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3940section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3941takes precedence over the command line option.
3942
3943If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3944command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3945treated as nested sorting command.
3946
3947@enumerate
3948@item
3949@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3950@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3951@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3952@item
3953@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3954@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3955@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3956@end enumerate
3957
3958If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3959command line option will be ignored.
3960
252b5132
RH
3961If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3962@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3963precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3964
3965This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3966files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3967sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3968The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3969with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3970linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3971@smallexample
3972@group
3973SECTIONS @{
3974 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3975 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3976 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3977 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3978@}
3979@end group
3980@end smallexample
3981
3982@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3983@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3984@cindex common symbol placement
3985@cindex uninitialized data placement
3986A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3987file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3988linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3989named @samp{COMMON}.
3990
3991You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3992other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3993particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3994input files are placed in another section.
3995
3996In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3997@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3998@smallexample
3999.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4000@end smallexample
4001
4002@cindex scommon section
4003@cindex small common symbols
4004Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4005example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4006symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4007different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4008the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4009symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4010to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4011locations.
4012
4013@cindex [COMMON]
4014You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4015notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4016@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4017
4018@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4019@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4020@cindex KEEP
4021@cindex garbage collection
4022When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4023it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4024This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4025with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4026@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4027
4028@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4029@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4030The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4031to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4032start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4033@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4034follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4035@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4036@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4037All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4038files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4039
4040@smallexample
4041@group
4042SECTIONS @{
4043 outputa 0x10000 :
4044 @{
4045 all.o
4046 foo.o (.input1)
4047 @}
36f63dca
NC
4048@end group
4049@group
252b5132
RH
4050 outputb :
4051 @{
4052 foo.o (.input2)
4053 foo1.o (.input1)
4054 @}
36f63dca
NC
4055@end group
4056@group
252b5132
RH
4057 outputc :
4058 @{
4059 *(.input1)
4060 *(.input2)
4061 @}
4062@}
4063@end group
a1ab1d2a 4064@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4065
4066@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4067@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4068@cindex data
4069@cindex section data
4070@cindex output section data
4071@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4072@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4073@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4074@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4075@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4076You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4077@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4078an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4079parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4080value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4081counter.
4082
4083The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4084store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4085bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4086stored.
4087
4088For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4089of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4090@smallexample
4091BYTE(1)
4092LONG(addr)
4093@end smallexample
4094
4095When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4096same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4097target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4098@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4099@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4100
4101If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4102which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4103When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4104true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4105endianness of the first input object file.
4106
36f63dca 4107Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4108between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4109@smallexample
4110SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4111@end smallexample
4112whereas this will work:
4113@smallexample
4114SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4115@end smallexample
4116
252b5132
RH
4117@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4118@cindex holes, filling
4119@cindex unspecified memory
4120You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4121current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4122otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4123gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4124with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4125necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4126point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4127than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4128different parts of an output section.
4129
4130This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4131value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4132@smallexample
563e308f 4133FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4137section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4138part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4139entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4140precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4141expression.
252b5132
RH
4142
4143@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4144@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4145There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4146commands.
4147
4148@table @code
4149@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4150@cindex input filename symbols
4151@cindex filename symbols
4152@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4153The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4154The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4155file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4156the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4157
4158This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4159normally used for any other object file format.
4160
4161@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4162@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4163@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4164@item CONSTRUCTORS
4165When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4166unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4167destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4168arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4169automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4170For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4171linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4172@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4173ignored for other object file formats.
4174
4175The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4176constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4177Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4178the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4179first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4180of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4181compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4182formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4183@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4184the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4185destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4186@code{exit}.
4187
4188For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4189arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4190addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4191and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4192linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4193runtime code expects to see.
4194
4195@smallexample
4196 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4197 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4198 *(.ctors)
4199 LONG(0)
4200 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4201 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4202 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4203 *(.dtors)
4204 LONG(0)
4205 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4206@end smallexample
4207
4208If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4209which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4210are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4211are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4212command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4213@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4214@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4215@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4216
4217Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4218and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4219need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4220scripts.
4221
4222@end table
4223
4224@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4225@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4226@cindex discarding sections
4227@cindex sections, discarding
4228@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4229The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4230for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4231be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4232@smallexample
49c13adb 4233.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4234@end smallexample
4235@noindent
4236will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4237@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4238sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4239space in an output section will also create the output section.
4240
a0976ea4 4241The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4242on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4243symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4244the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4245section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4246
4247@cindex /DISCARD/
4248The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4249input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4250section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4251
4252@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4253@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4254@cindex output section attributes
4255We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4256like this:
0c71d759 4257
252b5132 4258@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4259@group
7e7d5768 4260@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4261 [AT(@var{lma})]
4262 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4263 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4264 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4265 @{
4266 @var{output-section-command}
4267 @var{output-section-command}
4268 @dots{}
562d3460 4269 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4270@end group
4271@end smallexample
0c71d759 4272
252b5132
RH
4273We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4274@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4275remaining section attributes.
4276
a1ab1d2a 4277@menu
252b5132
RH
4278* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4279* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4280* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4281* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4282* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4283* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4284* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4285* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4286@end menu
4287
4288@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4289@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4290Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4291parentheses. The following types are defined:
4292
4293@table @code
4294@item NOLOAD
4295The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4296loaded into memory when the program is run.
4297@item DSECT
4298@itemx COPY
4299@itemx INFO
4300@itemx OVERLAY
4301These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4302rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4303marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4304section when the program is run.
4305@end table
4306
4307@kindex NOLOAD
4308@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4309@cindex loading, preventing
4310The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4311the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4312the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4313@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4314need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4315@smallexample
4316@group
4317SECTIONS @{
4318 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4319 @dots{}
4320@}
4321@end group
4322@end smallexample
4323
4324@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4325@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4326@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4327@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4328@cindex load address
4329@cindex section load address
4330Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4331@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4332@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4333specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4334address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4335
ea5cae92
NC
4336The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4337specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4338takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4339load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4340region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4341
4342If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4343section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4344load address:
4345
4346@itemize @bullet
4347@item
4348If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4349the LMA address as well.
4350
4351@item
4352If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4353
4354@item
4355Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4356with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4357section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4358VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4359the last section in the located region.
4360
4361@item
4362If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4363that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4364
4365@item
4366If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4367section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4368@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4369
4370@cindex ROM initialized data
4371@cindex initialized data in ROM
4372This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4373example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4374called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4375@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4376even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4377uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4378defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4379counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4380
4381@smallexample
4382@group
4383SECTIONS
4384 @{
4385 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4386 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4387 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4388 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4389 .bss 0x3000 :
4390 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4391@}
4392@end group
4393@end smallexample
4394
4395The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4396this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4397the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4398how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4399script.
4400
4401@smallexample
4402@group
4403extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4404char *src = &_etext;
4405char *dst = &_data;
4406
ea5cae92
NC
4407/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4408while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4409 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4410
ea5cae92 4411/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4412for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4413 *dst = 0;
4414@end group
4415@end smallexample
4416
bbf115d3
L
4417@node Forced Output Alignment
4418@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4419@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4420@cindex forcing output section alignment
4421@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4422You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4423
7e7d5768
AM
4424@node Forced Input Alignment
4425@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4426@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4427@cindex forcing input section alignment
4428@cindex input section alignment
4429You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4430SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4431sections, whether larger or smaller.
4432
0c71d759
NC
4433@node Output Section Constraint
4434@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4435@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4436@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4437@cindex constraints on output sections
4438You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4439of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4440read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4441@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4442
252b5132 4443@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4444@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4445@kindex >@var{region}
4446@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4447@cindex memory regions and sections
4448You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4449using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4450
4451Here is a simple example:
4452@smallexample
4453@group
4454MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4455SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4456@end group
4457@end smallexample
4458
4459@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4460@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4461@kindex :@var{phdr}
4462@cindex section, assigning to program header
4463@cindex program headers and sections
4464You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4465using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4466one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4467assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4468@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4469linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4470
4471Here is a simple example:
4472@smallexample
4473@group
4474PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4475SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4476@end group
4477@end smallexample
4478
4479@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4480@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4481@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4482@cindex section fill pattern
4483@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4484You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4485@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4486(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4487within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4488alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4489necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4490of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4491an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4492fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4493other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4494pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4495expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4496
4497You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4498output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4499
4500Here is a simple example:
4501@smallexample
4502@group
563e308f 4503SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4504@end group
4505@end smallexample
4506
4507@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4508@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4509@kindex OVERLAY
4510@cindex overlays
4511An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4512are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4513the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4514copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4515required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4516can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4517than another.
4518
4519Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4520@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4521output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4522command is as follows:
4523@smallexample
4524@group
4525OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4526 @{
4527 @var{secname1}
4528 @{
4529 @var{output-section-command}
4530 @var{output-section-command}
4531 @dots{}
4532 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4533 @var{secname2}
4534 @{
4535 @var{output-section-command}
4536 @var{output-section-command}
4537 @dots{}
4538 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4539 @dots{}
4540 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4541@end group
4542@end smallexample
4543
4544Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4545section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4546section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4547those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4548except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4549sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4550
4551The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4552addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4553memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4554whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4555and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4556and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4557
4558If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4559among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4560all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4561section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4562NOCROSSREFS}.
4563
4564For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4565provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4566defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4567@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4568the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4569within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4570symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4571
4572At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4573the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4574
4575Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4576@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4577@smallexample
4578@group
4579 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4580 @{
4581 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4582 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4583 @}
4584@end group
4585@end smallexample
4586@noindent
4587This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4588address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4589@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4590following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4591@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4592@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4593
4594C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4595like the following.
4596
4597@smallexample
4598@group
4599 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4600 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4601 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4602@end group
4603@end smallexample
4604
4605Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4606everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4607example could have been written identically as follows.
4608
4609@smallexample
4610@group
4611 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4612 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4613 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4614 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4615 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4616 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4617 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4618@end group
4619@end smallexample
4620
4621@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4622@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4623@kindex MEMORY
4624@cindex memory regions
4625@cindex regions of memory
4626@cindex allocating memory
4627@cindex discontinuous memory
4628The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4629memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4630
4631The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4632memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4633may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4634can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4635set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4636regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4637around to fit into the available regions.
4638
4639A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4640command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4641you wish. The syntax is:
4642@smallexample
4643@group
a1ab1d2a 4644MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4645 @{
4646 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4647 @dots{}
4648 @}
4649@end group
4650@end smallexample
4651
4652The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4653region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4654Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4655with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4656must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4657add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4658command.
252b5132
RH
4659
4660@cindex memory region attributes
4661The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4662whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4663not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4664@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4665section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4666the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4667them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4668
4669The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4670@table @samp
4671@item R
4672Read-only section
4673@item W
4674Read/write section
4675@item X
4676Executable section
4677@item A
4678Allocatable section
4679@item I
4680Initialized section
4681@item L
4682Same as @samp{I}
4683@item !
c09e9a8c 4684Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4685@end table
4686
4687If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4688@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4689attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4690in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4691attributes.
4692
4693@kindex ORIGIN =
4694@kindex o =
4695@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4696The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4697the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4698cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4699abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4700@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4701
4702@kindex LENGTH =
4703@kindex len =
4704@kindex l =
4705The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4706region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4707be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4708@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4709
4710In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4711available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4712and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4713linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4714is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4715or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4716explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4717region.
4718
4719@smallexample
4720@group
a1ab1d2a 4721MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4722 @{
4723 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4724 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4725 @}
4726@end group
4727@end smallexample
4728
4729Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4730specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4731@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4732a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4733output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4734was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4735the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4736output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4737region, the linker will issue an error message.
4738
3ec57632 4739It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4740expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4741@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4742
4743@smallexample
4744@group
c0065db7 4745 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4746@end group
4747@end smallexample
4748
252b5132
RH
4749@node PHDRS
4750@section PHDRS Command
4751@kindex PHDRS
4752@cindex program headers
4753@cindex ELF program headers
4754@cindex program segments
4755@cindex segments, ELF
4756The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4757@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4758loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4759program with the @samp{-p} option.
4760
4761When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4762reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4763program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4764This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4765interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4766
4767The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4768in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4769precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4770the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4771not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4772
4773The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4774generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4775ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4776
4777This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4778@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4779
4780@smallexample
4781@group
4782PHDRS
4783@{
4784 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4785 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4786@}
4787@end group
4788@end smallexample
4789
4790The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4791of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4792header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4793with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4794must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4795is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4796
4797Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4798system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4799specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4800sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4801attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4802Section Phdr}.
4803
4804It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4805merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4806repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4807contain the section.
4808
4809If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4810then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4811not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4812convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4813placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4814default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4815segment at all.
4816
4817@kindex FILEHDR
4818@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4819You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4820the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4821The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4822file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4823include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4824segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4825these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4826
4827The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4828value of the keyword.
4829
4830@table @asis
4831@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4832Indicates an unused program header.
4833
4834@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4835Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4836the file.
4837
4838@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4839Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4840
4841@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4842Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4843found.
4844
4845@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4846Indicates a segment holding note information.
4847
4848@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4849A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4850ABI.
4851
4852@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4853Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4854
4855@item @var{expression}
4856An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4857be used for types not defined above.
4858@end table
4859
4860You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4861in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4862@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4863Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4864output section attribute.
4865
4866The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4867which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4868explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4869an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4870header.
4871
4872Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4873headers used on a native ELF system.
4874
4875@example
4876@group
4877PHDRS
4878@{
4879 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4880 interp PT_INTERP ;
4881 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4882 data PT_LOAD ;
4883 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4884@}
4885
4886SECTIONS
4887@{
4888 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4889 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4890 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4891 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4892 @dots{}
4893 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4894 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4895 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4896 @dots{}
4897@}
4898@end group
4899@end example
4900
4901@node VERSION
4902@section VERSION Command
4903@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4904@cindex symbol versions
4905@cindex version script
4906@cindex versions of symbols
4907The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4908only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4909symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4910a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4911shared library.
4912
4913You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4914you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4915also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4916
4917The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4918@smallexample
4919VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4920@end smallexample
4921
4922The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4923Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4924version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4925version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4926version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4927scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4928library.
4929
4930The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4931examples.
4932
4933@smallexample
4934VERS_1.1 @{
4935 global:
4936 foo1;
4937 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4938 old*;
4939 original*;
4940 new*;
252b5132
RH
4941@};
4942
4943VERS_1.2 @{
4944 foo2;
4945@} VERS_1.1;
4946
4947VERS_2.0 @{
4948 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4949 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4950 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4951 "f(int, double)";
4952 @};
252b5132
RH
4953@} VERS_1.2;
4954@end smallexample
4955
4956This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4957version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4958The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4959a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4960of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4961symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4962is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4963in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4964However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4965name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4966
4967Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4968depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4969to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4970
4971Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4972depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4973and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4974
4975When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4976specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4977unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4978unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4979somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4980wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4981wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4982set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4983ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4984
4985The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4986they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4987could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4988However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4989
0f6bf451 4990Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4991in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4992symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4993won't.
4994
4995@smallexample
7c9c73be 4996@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4997@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4998
252b5132
RH
4999When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5000symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5001requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5002shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5003loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5004linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5005application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5006way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5007all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5008search for each symbol reference.
5009
5010The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5011doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5012that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5013functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5014the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5015required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5016that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5017versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5018the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5019
5020There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5021first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5022source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5023script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5024maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5025@smallexample
5026__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5027@end smallexample
5028@noindent
5029in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5030be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5031The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5032@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5033takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5034
5035The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5036function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5037an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5038version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5039linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5040
5041To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5042source file. Here is an example:
5043
5044@smallexample
5045__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5046__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5047__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5048__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5049@end smallexample
5050
5051In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5052unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5053example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5054@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5055
5056When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5057some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5058this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5059@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5060declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5061you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5062
5063If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5064within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5065(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5066specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5067
cb840a31
L
5068You can also specify the language in the version script:
5069
5070@smallexample
5071VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5072@end smallexample
5073
c0065db7 5074The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5075The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5076demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5077patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5078@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5079
86043bbb
MM
5080Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5081described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5082or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5083the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5084whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5085cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5086might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5087should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5088expect when you upgrade.
5089
252b5132
RH
5090@node Expressions
5091@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5092@cindex expressions
5093@cindex arithmetic
5094The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5095that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5096expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5097host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5098
5099You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5100
5101The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5102expressions.
5103
5104@menu
5105* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5106* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5107* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5108* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5109* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5110* Operators:: Operators
5111* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5112* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5113* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5114@end menu
5115
5116@node Constants
5117@subsection Constants
5118@cindex integer notation
5119@cindex constants in linker scripts
5120All constants are integers.
5121
5122As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5123octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5124hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5125@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5126@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5127value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5128
5129@cindex scaled integers
5130@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5131@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5132@cindex suffixes for integers
5133@cindex integer suffixes
5134In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5135constant by
5136@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5137@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5138@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5139@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5140@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5141@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5142@tex
5143${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5144@end tex
5145@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5146respectively. For example, the following
5147all refer to the same quantity:
5148
252b5132 5149@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5150_fourk_1 = 4K;
5151_fourk_2 = 4096;
5152_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5153_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5154@end smallexample
5155
8a308ae8
NC
5156Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5157conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5158
0c71d759
NC
5159@node Symbolic Constants
5160@subsection Symbolic Constants
5161@cindex symbolic constants
5162@kindex CONSTANT
5163It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5164the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5165
5166@table @code
5167@item MAXPAGESIZE
5168@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5169The target's maximum page size.
5170
5171@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5172@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5173The target's default page size.
5174@end table
5175
5176So for example:
5177
5178@smallexample
5179 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5180@end smallexample
5181
5182will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5183supported by the target.
5184
252b5132
RH
5185@node Symbols
5186@subsection Symbol Names
5187@cindex symbol names
5188@cindex names
5189@cindex quoted symbol names
5190@kindex "
5191Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5192and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5193Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5194specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5195keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5196@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5197"SECTION" = 9;
5198"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5199@end smallexample
5200
5201Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5202to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5203whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5204
ecca9871
L
5205@node Orphan Sections
5206@subsection Orphan Sections
5207@cindex orphan
5208Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5209are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5210script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5211output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5212placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5213attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5214same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5215If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5216at the end of the file.
5217
5218For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5219well as section flag.
5220
41911f68 5221If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5222the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5223__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5224section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5225orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5226representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5227character.
5228
252b5132
RH
5229@node Location Counter
5230@subsection The Location Counter
5231@kindex .
5232@cindex dot
5233@cindex location counter
5234@cindex current output location
5235The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5236current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5237location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5238within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5239anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5240
5241@cindex holes
5242Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5243moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5244location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5245and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5246doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5247
5248@smallexample
5249SECTIONS
5250@{
5251 output :
5252 @{
5253 file1(.text)
5254 . = . + 1000;
5255 file2(.text)
5256 . += 1000;
5257 file3(.text)
563e308f 5258 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5259@}
5260@end smallexample
5261@noindent
5262In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5263located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5264followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5265@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5266@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5267specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5268
5c6bbab8
NC
5269@cindex dot inside sections
5270Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5271current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5272statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5273absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5274however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5275not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5276
5277@smallexample
5278SECTIONS
5279@{
5280 . = 0x100
5281 .text: @{
5282 *(.text)
5283 . = 0x200
5284 @}
5285 . = 0x500
5286 .data: @{
5287 *(.data)
5288 . += 0x600
5289 @}
5290@}
5291@end smallexample
5292
5293The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5294and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5295the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5296much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5297move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5298and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5299the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5300the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5301
b5666f2f
AM
5302@cindex dot outside sections
5303Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5304output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5305needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5306
5307@smallexample
5308SECTIONS
5309@{
5310 start_of_text = . ;
5311 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5312 end_of_text = . ;
5313
5314 start_of_data = . ;
5315 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5316 end_of_data = . ;
5317@}
5318@end smallexample
5319
5320If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5321not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5322between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5323should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5324blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5325the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5326sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5327statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5328special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5329place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5330as follows:
5331
5332@smallexample
5333SECTIONS
5334@{
5335 start_of_text = . ;
5336 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5337 end_of_text = . ;
5338
5339 start_of_data = . ;
5340 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5341 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5342 end_of_data = . ;
5343@}
5344@end smallexample
5345
5346This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5347@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5348placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5349assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5350a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5351section. So you could write:
5352
5353@smallexample
5354SECTIONS
5355@{
5356 start_of_text = . ;
5357 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5358 end_of_text = . ;
5359
5360 . = . ;
5361 start_of_data = . ;
5362 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5363 end_of_data = . ;
5364@}
5365@end smallexample
5366
5367Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5368@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5369
252b5132
RH
5370@need 2000
5371@node Operators
5372@subsection Operators
5373@cindex operators for arithmetic
5374@cindex arithmetic operators
5375@cindex precedence in expressions
5376The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5377the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5378@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5379@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5380@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5381@smallexample
5382precedence associativity Operators Notes
5383(highest)
53841 left ! - ~ (1)
53852 left * / %
53863 left + -
53874 left >> <<
53885 left == != > < <= >=
53896 left &
53907 left |
53918 left &&
53929 left ||
539310 right ? :
539411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5395(lowest)
5396@end smallexample
5397Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5398(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5399(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5400@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5401@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5402@tex
5403\vskip \baselineskip
5404%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5405\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5406\hrule
5407\halign
5408{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5409height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5410&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5411height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5412\noalign{\hrule}
5413height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5414&highest&&&&&\cr
5415% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5416&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5417&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5418&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5419&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5420&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5421&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5422&7&&left&&|&\cr
5423&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5424&9&&left&&||&\cr
5425&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5426&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5427&lowest&&&&&\cr
5428height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5429\hrule}
5430@end tex
5431@iftex
5432{
5433@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5434@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5435@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5436}
5437@end iftex
5438@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5439
5440@node Evaluation
5441@subsection Evaluation
5442@cindex lazy evaluation
5443@cindex expression evaluation order
5444The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5445an expression when absolutely necessary.
5446
5447The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5448address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5449regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5450as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5451
5452However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5453until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5454other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5455for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5456
5457The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5458assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5459allocation.
5460
5461Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5462@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5463
5464If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5465available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5466following
5467@smallexample
5468@group
5469SECTIONS
5470 @{
a1ab1d2a 5471 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5472 @{ *(.text) @}
5473 @}
5474@end group
5475@end smallexample
5476@noindent
5477will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5478address}.
5479
5480@node Expression Section
5481@subsection The Section of an Expression
5482@cindex expression sections
5483@cindex absolute expressions
5484@cindex relative expressions
5485@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5486@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5487@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5488Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5489relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5490using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5491value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5492symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5493operations.
5494
abf4be64
AM
5495Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5496section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5497address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5498@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5499functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
7542af2a
AM
5500
5501When the linker evaluates an expression, the result depends on where
5502the expression is located in a linker script. Expressions appearing
5503outside an output section definitions are evaluated with all terms
5504first being converted to absolute addresses before applying operators,
5505and evaluate to an absolute address result. Expressions appearing
5506inside an output section definition are evaluated with more complex
5507rules, but the aim is to treat terms as relative addresses and produce
5508a relative address result. In particular, an assignment of a number
5509to a symbol results in a symbol relative to the output section with an
5510offset given by the number. So, in the following simple example,
252b5132 5511
7542af2a
AM
5512@smallexample
5513@group
5514SECTIONS
5515 @{
5516 . = 0x100;
5517 __executable_start = 0x100;
5518 .data :
5519 @{
5520 . = 0x10;
5521 __data_start = 0x10;
5522 *(.data)
5523 @}
5524 @dots{}
5525 @}
5526@end group
5527@end smallexample
252b5132 5528
7542af2a
AM
5529both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5530address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5531@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5532section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5533
7542af2a
AM
5534For expressions appearing inside an output section definition
5535involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute addresses, ld
5536follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5537
5538@itemize @bullet
5539@item
5540Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5541relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5542and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5543@item
5544Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5545or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5546same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5547address before applying the operator.
5548@end itemize
5549
5550The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5551
5552@itemize @bullet
5553@item
5554An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5555@item
5556The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5557@item
5558The result of other operations on relative addresses (after above
5559conversions) is a relative address in the same section as the operand(s).
5560@item
5561The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5562conversions) is an absolute address.
5563@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5564
5565You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5566to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5567create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5568section @samp{.data}:
5569@smallexample
5570SECTIONS
5571 @{
5572 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5573 @}
5574@end smallexample
5575@noindent
5576If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5577@samp{.data} section.
5578
7542af2a
AM
5579Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5580particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5581
252b5132
RH
5582@node Builtin Functions
5583@subsection Builtin Functions
5584@cindex functions in expressions
5585The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5586use in linker script expressions.
5587
5588@table @code
5589@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5590@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5591@cindex expression, absolute
5592Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5593of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5594value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5595normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5596
5597@item ADDR(@var{section})
5598@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5599@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5600Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5601script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5602the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5603@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5604@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5605the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5606@smallexample
5607@group
5608SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5609 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5610 @{
252b5132
RH
5611 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5612 @dots{}
5613 @}
5614 .output :
5615 @{
5616 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5617 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5618 @}
5619@dots{} @}
5620@end group
5621@end smallexample
5622
876f4090
NS
5623@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5624@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5625@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5626@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5627@cindex round up location counter
5628@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5629@cindex round up expression
5630@cindex align expression
5631Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5632to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5633doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5634arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5635expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5636equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5637
5638Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5639next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5640variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5641input sections:
252b5132
RH
5642@smallexample
5643@group
5644SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5645 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5646 *(.data)
5647 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5648 @}
5649@dots{} @}
5650@end group
5651@end smallexample
5652@noindent
5653The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5654a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5655a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5656of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5657
5658The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5659
362c1d1a
NS
5660@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5661@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5662@cindex section alignment
5663Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5664been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5665evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5666the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5667value in that section.
5668@smallexample
5669@group
5670SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5671 .output @{
5672 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5673 @dots{}
5674 @}
5675@dots{} @}
5676@end group
5677@end smallexample
5678
252b5132
RH
5679@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5680@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5681This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5682scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5683section.
5684
2d20f7bf
JJ
5685@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5686@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5687This is equivalent to either
5688@smallexample
5689(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5690@end smallexample
5691or
5692@smallexample
5693(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5694@end smallexample
5695@noindent
5696depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5697for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5698@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5699If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5700memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5701bytes in the on-disk file.
5702
5703This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5704any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5705@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5706be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5707working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5708
5709@noindent
5710Example:
5711@smallexample
5712 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5713@end smallexample
5714
5715@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5716@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5717This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5718evaluation purposes.
5719
5720@smallexample
5721 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5722@end smallexample
5723
a4f5ad88
JJ
5724@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5725@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5726This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5727@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5728When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5729does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5730@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5731boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5732it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5733@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5734
5735@smallexample
5736 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5737@end smallexample
5738
252b5132
RH
5739@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5740@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5741@cindex symbol defaults
5742Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5743defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5744return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5745default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5746shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5747the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5748existed, its value is preserved:
5749
5750@smallexample
5751@group
5752SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5753 .text : @{
5754 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5755 @dots{}
5756 @}
5757 @dots{}
5758@}
5759@end group
5760@end smallexample
5761
3ec57632
NC
5762@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5763@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5764Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5765
252b5132
RH
5766@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5767@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5768@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5769Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5770Section LMA}).
5771
5772@kindex MAX
5773@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5774Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5775
5776@kindex MIN
5777@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5778Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5779
5780@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5781@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5782@cindex unallocated address, next
5783Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5784This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5785use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5786output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5787
3ec57632
NC
5788@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5789@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5790Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5791
ba916c8a
MM
5792@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5793@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5794Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5795value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5796option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5797@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5798be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5799``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5800name.
5801
252b5132
RH
5802@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5803@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5804@cindex section size
5805Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5806been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5807evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5808@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5809@smallexample
5810@group
5811SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5812 .output @{
5813 .start = . ;
5814 @dots{}
5815 .end = . ;
5816 @}
5817 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5818 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5819@dots{} @}
5820@end group
5821@end smallexample
5822
5823@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5824@itemx sizeof_headers
5825@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5826@cindex header size
5827Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5828information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5829this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5830choose, to facilitate paging.
5831
5832@cindex not enough room for program headers
5833@cindex program headers, not enough room
5834When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5835@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5836number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5837addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5838additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5839room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5840the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5841script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5842you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5843command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5844@end table
5845
5846@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5847@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5848@cindex implicit linker scripts
5849If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5850an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5851linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5852linker will report an error.
5853
5854An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5855
5856Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5857assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5858commands.
5859
5860Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5861at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5862read. This can affect archive searching.
5863
5864@ifset GENERIC
5865@node Machine Dependent
5866@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5867
5868@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5869@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5870sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5871functionality are not listed.
5872
5873@menu
36f63dca
NC
5874@ifset H8300
5875* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5876@end ifset
5877@ifset I960
5878* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5879@end ifset
5880@ifset ARM
5881* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5882@end ifset
5883@ifset HPPA
5884* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5885@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5886@ifset M68K
5887* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5888@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5889@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5890* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5891@end ifset
2469cfa2 5892@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5893* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5894@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5895@ifset M68HC11
5896* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5897@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5898@ifset POWERPC
5899* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5900@end ifset
5901@ifset POWERPC64
5902* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5903@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5904@ifset SPU
5905* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5906@end ifset
74459f0e 5907@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5908* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5909@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5910@ifset WIN32
5911* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5912@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5913@ifset XTENSA
5914* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5915@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5916@end menu
5917@end ifset
5918
252b5132
RH
5919@ifset H8300
5920@ifclear GENERIC
5921@raisesections
5922@end ifclear
5923
5924@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5925@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5926
5927@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5928For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5929you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5930
5931@table @emph
5932@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5933@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5934@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5935targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5936program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5937respectively.
5938
5939@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5940@item synthesizing instructions
5941@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5942@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5943sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5944page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5945(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5946@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5947top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5948
5949@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5950@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5951biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5952which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5953page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5954(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5955@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5956the top page of memory).
5957
5958@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5959@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
596032 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5961changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5962(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5963@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5964the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5965@end table
5966
5967@ifclear GENERIC
5968@lowersections
5969@end ifclear
5970@end ifset
5971
36f63dca 5972@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5973@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5974@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5975@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5976@node Renesas
5977@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5978
c2dcd04e
NC
5979@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5980H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5981options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5982@end ifset
5983@end ifclear
5984
5985@ifset I960
5986@ifclear GENERIC
5987@raisesections
5988@end ifclear
5989
5990@node i960
5991@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5992
5993@cindex i960 support
5994
5995You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5996specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5997family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5998incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5999linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6000libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6001search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6002
6003For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6004well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6005paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6006the names
6007
6008@smallexample
6009@group
6010try
6011libtry.a
6012tryca
6013libtryca.a
6014@end group
6015@end smallexample
6016
6017@noindent
6018The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6019two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6020
6021You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6022the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6023use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6024specifies a library.
6025
6026@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6027@cindex relaxing on i960
6028@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6029you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6030@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6031them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6032instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6033instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6034target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6035not itself call any subroutines).
6036
48229727
JB
6037@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6038@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6039@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6040The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6041
6042The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6043
85fdf906
AH
6044@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6045@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6046The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6047
36f63dca
NC
6048@ifclear GENERIC
6049@lowersections
6050@end ifclear
6051@end ifset
6052
6053@ifset ARM
6054@ifclear GENERIC
6055@raisesections
6056@end ifclear
6057
93fd0973
SC
6058@ifset M68HC11
6059@ifclear GENERIC
6060@raisesections
6061@end ifclear
6062
6063@node M68HC11/68HC12
6064@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6065
6066@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6067
6068@subsection Linker Relaxation
6069
6070For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6071optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6072
6073@table @emph
6074@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6075@item relaxing address modes
6076@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6077targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6078program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6079respectively.
6080
6081@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6082transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6083page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6084
6085@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6086When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6087of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6088addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6089@code{bset} instructions.
6090
6091@end table
6092
6093@subsection Trampoline Generation
6094
6095@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6096@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6097For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6098call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6099will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6100trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6101case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6102point to the function trampoline.
6103
6104@ifclear GENERIC
6105@lowersections
6106@end ifclear
6107@end ifset
6108
36f63dca 6109@node ARM
3674e28a 6110@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6111
6112@cindex ARM interworking support
6113@kindex --support-old-code
6114For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6115between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6116been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6117line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6118libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6119option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6120given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6121which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6122the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6123non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6124
6125@cindex thumb entry point
6126@cindex entry point, thumb
6127@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6128The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6129@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6130But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6131branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6132executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6133
ce11ba6c
KT
6134@cindex PE import table prefixing
6135@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6136The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6137the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6138elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6139import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6140
e489d0ae
PB
6141@cindex BE8
6142@kindex --be8
6143The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6144executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6145The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6146
3674e28a
PB
6147@cindex TARGET1
6148@kindex --target1-rel
6149@kindex --target1-abs
6150The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6151@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6152or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6153and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6154
6155@cindex TARGET2
6156@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6157The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6158@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6159meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6160@table @samp
6161@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6162@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6163@item abs
6164@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6165@item got-rel
6166@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6167@end table
6168
319850b4
JB
6169@cindex FIX_V4BX
6170@kindex --fix-v4bx
6171The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6172specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6173interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6174also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6175
6176In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6177linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6178@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6179
6180In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6181relocations are ignored.
6182
845b51d6
PB
6183@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6184@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6185Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6186relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6187
6188@smallexample
6189TST rM, #1
6190MOVEQ PC, rM
6191BX Rn
6192@end smallexample
6193
6194This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6195and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6196condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6197
33bfe774
JB
6198@cindex USE_BLX
6199@kindex --use-blx
6200The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6201BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6202situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6203code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6204each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6205
6206This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6207specify it if you are using that target.
6208
c6dd86c6
JB
6209@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6210@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6211The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6212bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6213instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6214to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6215the support code can read the intended values.
6216
6217The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6218intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6219and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6220intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6221full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6222you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6223
6224If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6225enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6226@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6227mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6228vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6229@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6230
6231If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6232potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6233such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6234first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6235instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6236the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6237are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6238
bf21ed78
MS
6239@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6240@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6241The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6242warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6243enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6244linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6245using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6246not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6247
6248@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6249@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6250The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6251warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6252@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6253linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6254using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6255
726150b7
NC
6256@cindex PIC_VENEER
6257@kindex --pic-veneer
6258The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6259ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6260is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6261@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6262
6263@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6264@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6265The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6266code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6267perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6268placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6269controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6270The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6271duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6272group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6273code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6274where they should be placed.
6275
6276The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6277@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6278placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6279branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6280placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6281value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6282exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6283A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6284linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6285from the input sections.
6286
6287The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6288@samp{N = +1}.
6289
1a51c1a4
NC
6290Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6291only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6292otherwise.
6293
36f63dca
NC
6294@ifclear GENERIC
6295@lowersections
6296@end ifclear
6297@end ifset
6298
6299@ifset HPPA
6300@ifclear GENERIC
6301@raisesections
6302@end ifclear
6303
6304@node HPPA ELF32
6305@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6306@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6307@kindex --multi-subspace
6308When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6309import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6310The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6311stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6312multiple sub-spaces.
6313
6314@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6315@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6316Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6317stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6318@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6319sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6320a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6321the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6322conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6323prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6324A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6325branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6326@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6327@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6328detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6329positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6330
6331Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6332single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6333create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6334large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6335
6336@ifclear GENERIC
6337@lowersections
6338@end ifclear
6339@end ifset
6340
7fb9f789
NC
6341@ifset M68K
6342@ifclear GENERIC
6343@raisesections
6344@end ifclear
6345
6346@node M68K
6347@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6348
6349@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6350@kindex --got=@var{type}
6351The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6352The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6353@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6354the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6355@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6356entries only at non-negative offsets.
6357@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6358entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6359support such GOTs.
6360@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6361output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6362file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6363files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6364
6365@ifclear GENERIC
6366@lowersections
6367@end ifclear
6368@end ifset
6369
36f63dca
NC
6370@ifset MMIX
6371@ifclear GENERIC
6372@raisesections
6373@end ifclear
6374
6375@node MMIX
6376@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6377For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6378@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6379understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6380can translate between the two formats.
6381
6382There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6383Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6384registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6385equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6386@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6387global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6388this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6389symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6390
7a2de473
HPN
6391Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6392@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6393The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6394of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6395
6396Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6397are left out from an mmo file.
6398
6399@ifclear GENERIC
6400@lowersections
6401@end ifclear
6402@end ifset
6403
6404@ifset MSP430
6405@ifclear GENERIC
6406@raisesections
6407@end ifclear
6408
6409@node MSP430
6410@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6411For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6412will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6413just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6414
6415@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6416The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6417
6418@table @code
6419@item @samp{.vectors}
6420Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6421
6422@item @samp{.bootloader}
6423Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6424in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6425
6426@item @samp{.infomem}
6427Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6428this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6429
c0065db7 6430@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6431This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6432in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6433
6434@item @samp{.noinit}
6435Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6436
c0065db7 6437The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6438@end table
6439
6440@ifclear GENERIC
6441@lowersections
6442@end ifclear
6443@end ifset
6444
2a60a7a8
AM
6445@ifset POWERPC
6446@ifclear GENERIC
6447@raisesections
6448@end ifclear
6449
6450@node PowerPC ELF32
6451@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6452@cindex PowerPC long branches
6453@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6454Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6455displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6456@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6457@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6458the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6459section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6460section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6461@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6462both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6463considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6464
6465@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6466@table @option
6467@cindex PowerPC PLT
6468@kindex --bss-plt
6469@item --bss-plt
6470Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6471generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6472the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6473writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6474@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6475PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6476compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6477BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6478
016687f8
AM
6479@kindex --secure-plt
6480@item --secure-plt
6481@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6482@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6483when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6484layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6485style BSS PLT.
6486
2a60a7a8
AM
6487@cindex PowerPC GOT
6488@kindex --sdata-got
6489@item --sdata-got
6490The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6491sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6492@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6493section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6494@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6495@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6496@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6497@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6498PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6499pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6500GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6501really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6502
6503@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6504@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6505@item --emit-stub-syms
6506This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6507symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6508
6509@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6510@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6511@item --no-tls-optimize
6512PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6513sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6514disable the optimization.
6515@end table
6516
6517@ifclear GENERIC
6518@lowersections
6519@end ifclear
6520@end ifset
6521
6522@ifset POWERPC64
6523@ifclear GENERIC
6524@raisesections
6525@end ifclear
6526
6527@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6528@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6529
6530@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6531@table @option
6532@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6533@kindex --stub-group-size
6534@item --stub-group-size
6535Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6536by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6537@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6538sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6539a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6540the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6541conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6542prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6543A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6544branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6545@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6546@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6547detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6548positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6549
6550Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6551single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6552create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6553large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6554
6555@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6556@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6557@item --emit-stub-syms
6558This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6559symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6560
6561@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6562@kindex --dotsyms
6563@kindex --no-dotsyms
6564@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6565These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6566in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6567function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6568code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6569properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6570to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6571@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6572dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6573feature.
6574
6575@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6576@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6577@item --no-tls-optimize
6578PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6579sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6580disable the optimization.
6581
6582@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6583@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6584@item --no-opd-optimize
6585PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6586corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6587the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6588Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6589
6590@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6591@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6592@item --non-overlapping-opd
6593Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6594@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6595the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6596entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6597
6598@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6599@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6600@item --no-toc-optimize
6601PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6602entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6603reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6604marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6605marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6606relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6607unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6608reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6609discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6610reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6611code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6612optimization.
6613
6614@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6615@kindex --no-multi-toc
6616@item --no-multi-toc
6617By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6618entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6619total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6620grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6621TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6622calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6623help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
662464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6625Use this option to turn off this feature.
6626@end table
6627
6628@ifclear GENERIC
6629@lowersections
6630@end ifclear
6631@end ifset
6632
49fa1e15
AM
6633@ifset SPU
6634@ifclear GENERIC
6635@raisesections
6636@end ifclear
6637
6638@node SPU ELF
6639@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6640
6641@cindex SPU ELF options
6642@table @option
6643
6644@cindex SPU plugins
6645@kindex --plugin
6646@item --plugin
6647This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6648
6649@cindex SPU overlays
6650@kindex --no-overlays
6651@item --no-overlays
6652Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6653regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6654@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6655turns off all this special overlay handling.
6656
6657@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6658@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6659@item --emit-stub-syms
6660This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6661symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6662
6663@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6664@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6665@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6666This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6667function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6668on calls to non-overlay regions.
6669
6670@cindex SPU local store size
6671@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6672@item --local-store=lo:hi
6673@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6674the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6675range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6676
c0065db7 6677@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6678@kindex --stack-analysis
6679@item --stack-analysis
6680SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6681unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6682under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6683@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6684@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6685determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6686for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6687for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6688for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6689find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6690and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6691under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6692dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6693is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6694and calls will be given.
6695
c0065db7 6696@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6697@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6698@item --emit-stack-syms
6699This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6700in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6701These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6702functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6703functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6704such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6705The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6706@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6707@end table
6708
6709@ifclear GENERIC
6710@lowersections
6711@end ifclear
6712@end ifset
6713
36f63dca
NC
6714@ifset TICOFF
6715@ifclear GENERIC
6716@raisesections
6717@end ifclear
6718
6719@node TI COFF
6720@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6721@cindex TI COFF versions
6722@kindex --format=@var{version}
6723The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6724TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6725also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6726format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6727header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6728
6729@ifclear GENERIC
6730@lowersections
6731@end ifclear
6732@end ifset
6733
2ca22b03
NC
6734@ifset WIN32
6735@ifclear GENERIC
6736@raisesections
6737@end ifclear
6738
6739@node WIN32
6740@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6741
c0065db7 6742This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6743See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6744command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6745
6746@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6747@cindex import libraries
6748@item import libraries
69da35b5 6749The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6750libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6751regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6752archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6753support for creating such libraries provided with the
6754@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6755
c0065db7
RM
6756@item exporting DLL symbols
6757@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6758The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6759
6760@table @emph
6761@item using auto-export functionality
6762@cindex using auto-export functionality
6763By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6764which is controlled by the following command line options:
6765
0a5d968e
NC
6766@itemize
6767@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6768@item --exclude-symbols
6769@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6770@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6771@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6772@end itemize
6773
09e2aba4
DK
6774When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6775(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6776symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6777often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6778private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6779options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6780exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6781final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6782
6783If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6784command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6785if either of the following are true:
6786
6787@itemize
6788@item A DEF file is used.
6789@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6790@end itemize
dc8465bf 6791
c0065db7
RM
6792@item using a DEF file
6793@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6794Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6795an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6796exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6797name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6798command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6799
6800@example
6801gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6802@end example
6803
0a5d968e
NC
6804Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6805@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6806
dc8465bf
NC
6807Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6808
6809@example
4b5bd4e7 6810LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6811
6812EXPORTS
6813foo
6814bar
6815_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6816another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6817var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6818doo = foo == foo2
6819eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6820@end example
dc8465bf 6821
7fcab871 6822This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6823symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6824alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6825by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6826@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6827@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6828export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6829in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6830symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6831
6b31ad16
DS
6832The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6833name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6834the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6835
b45619c0
NC
6836When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6837library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6838@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6839executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6840
6841With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6842specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6843non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6844
6845If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6846or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6847filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6848
4b5bd4e7
DS
6849The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6850
6851@example
6852EXPORTS
6853 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6854 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6855 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6856@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6857
6858Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6859@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6860@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6861@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6862Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6863@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6864string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6865
6866The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6867
6868@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6869will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6870by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6871linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6872library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6873
6874@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6875The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6876the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6877@code{*_imp__foo}).
6878
6879@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6880well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6881read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6882variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6883the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6884extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6885application will behave unexpectedly.
6886
6887@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6888it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6889symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6890API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6891the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6892
4b5bd4e7
DS
6893See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6894other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6895
6896@cindex creating a DEF file
6897While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6898with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6899
6900@item Using decorations
6901@cindex Using decorations
6902Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6903itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6904declared as:
6905
6906@example
6907__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6908__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6909@end example
6910
6911All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6912any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6913this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6914the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6915
6916Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6917decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6918instead:
6919
6920@example
6921__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6922__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6923@end example
6924
c0065db7
RM
6925This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6926when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6927variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6928code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6929of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6930omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6931@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6932information.
c0065db7 6933@end table
dc8465bf 6934
2ca22b03
NC
6935@cindex automatic data imports
6936@item automatic data imports
6937The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6938by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6939compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6940issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6941code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6942c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6943initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6944decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6945platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6946command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6947The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6948suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6949trigger the feature's use.
6950
c0065db7 6951auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6952additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6953
c0065db7 6954"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6955documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6956
c0065db7
RM
6957The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6958occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6959One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6960below.
6961
6962@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6963For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6964object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6965offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6966field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6967in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6968without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6969The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6970references.
6971
c0065db7
RM
6972The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6973be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6974themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6975runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6976compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6977support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6978run without error on an older system.
6979
c0065db7
RM
6980@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6981enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6982
6983@cindex direct linking to a dll
6984@item direct linking to a dll
6985The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6986including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6987libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6988traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6989libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6990function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6991though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6992storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6993tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6994large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6995
c0065db7 6996Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6997@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6998of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6999perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7000select the dll instead of an import library.
7001
2ca22b03 7002
69da35b5
NC
7003For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7004to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7005
7006@example
45e948fe
NC
7007libxxx.dll.a
7008xxx.dll.a
7009libxxx.a
7010xxx.lib
69da35b5 7011cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7012libxxx.dll
7013xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7014@end example
7015
69da35b5
NC
7016before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7017
c0065db7
RM
7018(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7019where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7020@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7021file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7022@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7023
c0065db7
RM
7024Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7025@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7026was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7027various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7028could coexist on the same machine.
7029
2ca22b03
NC
7030The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7031applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7032libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7033
7034@example
7035bin/
7036 cygxxx.dll
7037lib/
7038 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7039 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7040@end example
7041
c0065db7
RM
7042Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7043done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7044
70451. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7046@example
7047gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7048@end example
2ca22b03 7049
69da35b5
NC
7050However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7051(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7052@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7053not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7054
2ca22b03
NC
70552. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7056directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7057should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7058making the app/dll.
7059
7060@example
7061ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7062@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7063
7064Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7065
7066@example
7067gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7068@end example
69da35b5
NC
7069
7070This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7071perfectly legal
7072
7073@example
7074bin/
7075 cygxxx-5.dll
7076lib/
c0065db7 7077 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7078@end example
7079
dc8465bf 7080Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7081even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7082@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7083
7084Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7085wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7086
70871. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7088work with auto-imported data.
7089
dc8465bf
NC
70902. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7091import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7092symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7093for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7094possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7095
45e948fe
NC
70963. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7097critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7098in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7099stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7100
69da35b5 7101So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7102true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7103a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7104binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7105massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7106requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7107will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7108
c0065db7 7109@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7110@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7111@item adding additional names
7112Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7113A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7114exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7115when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7116import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7117
c0065db7 7118@example
dc8465bf
NC
7119LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7120
7121EXPORTS
c0065db7 7122foo
dc8465bf 7123_foo = foo
c0065db7 7124@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7125
7126The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7127
7128Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7129source code using the "weak" attribute:
7130
c0065db7
RM
7131@example
7132void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7133void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7134@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7135
7136See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7137symbols.
7138
7139@item renaming symbols
7140Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7141kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7142@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7143DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7144created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7145
c0065db7 7146@example
dc8465bf
NC
7147LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7148
7149EXPORTS
7150_foo = foo
c0065db7 7151@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7152
7153The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7154@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7155@end table
dc8465bf 7156
0a5d968e 7157Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7158unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7159If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7160@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7161that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7162@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7163renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7164to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7165the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7166In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7167which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7168
7169@cindex weak externals
7170@item weak externals
7171The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7172weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7173defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7174are three variants of weak externals:
7175@itemize
7176@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7177called lazy externals.
7178@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7179This form is not presently implemented.
7180@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7181implemented.
7182@end itemize
7183As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7184are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7185uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7186
7187@cindex aligned common symbols
7188@item aligned common symbols
7189As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7190desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7191the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7192carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7193by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7194tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7195but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7196warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7197@end table
7198
7199@ifclear GENERIC
7200@lowersections
7201@end ifclear
7202@end ifset
7203
e0001a05
NC
7204@ifset XTENSA
7205@ifclear GENERIC
7206@raisesections
7207@end ifclear
7208
7209@node Xtensa
7210@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7211
7212@cindex Xtensa processors
7213The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7214@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7215specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7216keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7217example, with the command:
7218
7219@smallexample
7220SECTIONS
7221@{
7222 .text : @{
7223 *(.literal .text)
7224 @}
7225@}
7226@end smallexample
7227
7228@noindent
7229@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7230and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7231literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7232interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7233group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7234files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7235and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7236
43cd72b9 7237@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7238@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7239Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7240provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7241is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7242literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7243will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7244location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7245the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7246unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7247@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7248range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7249
7250For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7251to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7252instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7253instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7254instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7255@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7256hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7257By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7258switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7259density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7260instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7261performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7262linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7263a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7264
7265The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7266control the linker:
7267
7268@cindex Xtensa options
7269@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7270@item --size-opt
7271When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7272more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7273no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7274alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7275preserve the correctness of the code.
7276@end table
e0001a05
NC
7277
7278@ifclear GENERIC
7279@lowersections
7280@end ifclear
7281@end ifset
7282
252b5132
RH
7283@ifclear SingleFormat
7284@node BFD
7285@chapter BFD
7286
7287@cindex back end
7288@cindex object file management
7289@cindex object formats available
7290@kindex objdump -i
7291The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7292These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7293object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7294format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7295it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7296associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7297object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7298(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7299list all the formats available for your configuration.
7300
7301@cindex BFD requirements
7302@cindex requirements for BFD
7303As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7304several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7305BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7306formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7307been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7308BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7309may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7310
7311One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7312mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7313useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7314conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7315
7316@menu
7317* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7318@end menu
7319
7320@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7321@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7322@cindex opening object files
7323@include bfdsumm.texi
7324@end ifclear
7325
7326@node Reporting Bugs
7327@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7328@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7329@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7330
ff5dcc92 7331Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7332
7333Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7334it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7335to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7336work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7337@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7338
7339In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7340information that enables us to fix the bug.
7341
7342@menu
7343* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7344* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7345@end menu
7346
7347@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7348@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7349@cindex bug criteria
7350
7351If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7352
7353@itemize @bullet
7354@cindex fatal signal
7355@cindex linker crash
7356@cindex crash of linker
7357@item
7358If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7359@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7360
7361@cindex error on valid input
7362@item
ff5dcc92 7363If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7364
7365@cindex invalid input
7366@item
ff5dcc92 7367If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7368may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7369object files are correct.
7370
7371@item
7372If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7373improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7374@end itemize
7375
7376@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7377@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7378@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7379@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7380
7381A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7382products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7383recommend you contact that organization first.
7384
7385You can find contact information for many support companies and
7386individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7387distribution.
7388
ad22bfe8 7389@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7390Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7391@value{BUGURL}.
7392@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7393
7394The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7395@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7396fact or leave it out, state it!
7397
7398Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7399problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7400assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7401matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7402the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7403location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7404were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7405into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7406specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7407and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7408
7409Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7410the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7411on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7412
7413Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7414bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7415respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7416You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7417
7418To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7419
7420@itemize @bullet
7421@item
ff5dcc92 7422The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7423the @samp{--version} argument.
7424
7425Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7426the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7427
7428@item
ff5dcc92 7429Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7430patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7431
7432@item
7433The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7434version number.
7435
7436@item
ff5dcc92 7437What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7438``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7439
7440@item
7441The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7442observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7443list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7444sufficient.
7445
7446If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7447and then we might not encounter the bug.
7448
7449@item
7450A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7451bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7452provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7453bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7454state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7455requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7456we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7457attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7458
7459If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7460@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7461object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7462@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7463how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7464
7465@item
7466A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7467incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7468
ff5dcc92 7469Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7470will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7471not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7472a chance to make a mistake.
7473
7474Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7475say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7476copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7477C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7478and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7479fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7480you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7481any conclusion from our observations.
7482
7483@item
ff5dcc92 7484If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7485diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7486@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7487If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7488context, not by line number.
7489
7490The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7491sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7492@end itemize
7493
7494Here are some things that are not necessary:
7495
7496@itemize @bullet
7497@item
7498A description of the envelope of the bug.
7499
7500Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7501which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7502changes will not affect it.
7503
7504This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7505will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7506with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7507We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7508
7509Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7510of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7511output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7512less time, and so on.
7513
7514However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7515report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7516
7517@item
7518A patch for the bug.
7519
7520A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7521the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7522a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7523to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7524
ff5dcc92 7525Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7526construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7527through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7528able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7529fixed.
7530
7531And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7532patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7533help us to understand.
7534
7535@item
7536A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7537
7538Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7539things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7540@end itemize
7541
7542@node MRI
7543@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7544@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7545To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7546linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7547alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7548described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7549simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7550@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7551linker commands; these commands are described here.
7552
7553In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7554file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7555features to make use of them.
7556
7557You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7558@samp{-c} command-line option.
7559
7560Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7561command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7562blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7563MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7564issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7565
7566Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7567
7568You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7569lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7570The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7571
7572@table @code
7573@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7574@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7575@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7576Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7577the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7578@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7579your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7580script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7581commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7582input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7583@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7584
7585@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7586@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7587Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7588in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7589
7590@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7591
7592@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7593@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7594Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7595@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7596
7597@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7598@item BASE @var{expression}
7599Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7600absolute addresses) in the output file.
7601
7602@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7603@item CHIP @var{expression}
7604@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7605This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7606
7607@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7608@item END
7609This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7610
7611@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7612@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7613Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7614language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7615
7616@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7617@item
252b5132
RH
7618S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7619
7620@item
7621IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7622
7623@item
7624COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7625@samp{COFF}
7626@end enumerate
7627
7628@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7629@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7630Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7631@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7632
7633The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7634same line, with no change in its effect.
7635
7636@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7637@item LOAD @var{filename}
7638@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7639Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7640same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7641command line.
7642
7643@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7644@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7645@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7646MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7647option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7648
7649@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7650@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7651@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7652Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7653order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7654script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7655sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7656file, in the order specified.
7657
7658@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7659@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7660@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7661@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7662Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7663@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7664
7665@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7666@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7667@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7668@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7669You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7670specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7671If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7672@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7673@end table
7674
793c5807
NC
7675@node GNU Free Documentation License
7676@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7677@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7678
370b66a1
CD
7679@node LD Index
7680@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7681
7682@printindex cp
7683
7684@tex
7685% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7686% meantime:
7687\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7688\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7689\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7690\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7691\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7692\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7693\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7694\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7695\page\colophon
7696% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7697@end tex
7698
252b5132 7699@bye